|  | % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\texinfoversion{2004-02-19.09} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, | 
|  | % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software | 
|  | % Foundation, Inc. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | 
|  | % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | 
|  | % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at | 
|  | % your option) any later version. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | 
|  | % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | 
|  | % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU | 
|  | % General Public License for more details. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | 
|  | % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write | 
|  | % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, | 
|  | % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing | 
|  | % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | 
|  | % restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | 
|  | % reports; you can get the latest version from: | 
|  | %   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or | 
|  | %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex | 
|  | %     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). | 
|  | % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | 
|  | % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a | 
|  | % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | 
|  | % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | 
|  | % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple | 
|  | % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | 
|  | %   tex foo.texi | 
|  | %   texindex foo.?? | 
|  | %   tex foo.texi | 
|  | %   tex foo.texi | 
|  | %   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. | 
|  | % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | 
|  | % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more | 
|  | % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some | 
|  | % extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the | 
|  | % full Texinfo distribution. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | 
|  | % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | 
|  | % they might have appeared in the input file name. | 
|  | \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | 
|  | \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{Basics,} | 
|  | \chardef\other=12 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | 
|  | % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | 
|  | \let\+ = \relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. | 
|  | \let\ptexb=\b | 
|  | \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | 
|  | \let\ptexc=\c | 
|  | \let\ptexcomma=\, | 
|  | \let\ptexdot=\. | 
|  | \let\ptexdots=\dots | 
|  | \let\ptexend=\end | 
|  | \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | 
|  | \let\ptexexclam=\! | 
|  | \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote | 
|  | \let\ptexgtr=> | 
|  | \let\ptexhat=^ | 
|  | \let\ptexi=\i | 
|  | \let\ptexindent=\indent | 
|  | \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | 
|  | \let\ptexinsert=\insert | 
|  | \let\ptexlbrace=\{ | 
|  | \let\ptexless=< | 
|  | \let\ptexplus=+ | 
|  | \let\ptexrbrace=\} | 
|  | \let\ptexslash=\/ | 
|  | \let\ptexstar=\* | 
|  | \let\ptext=\t | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | 
|  | % starts a new line in the output. | 
|  | \newlinechar = `^^J | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error | 
|  | % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | 
|  | \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. | 
|  | \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is | 
|  | % in some cases the escape char. | 
|  | \chardef\colonChar = `\: | 
|  | \chardef\commaChar = `\, | 
|  | \chardef\dotChar   = `\. | 
|  | \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | 
|  | \chardef\questChar = `\? | 
|  | \chardef\semiChar  = `\; | 
|  | \chardef\underChar = `\_ | 
|  |  | 
|  | \chardef\spaceChar = `\ % | 
|  | \chardef\spacecat = 10 | 
|  | \def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore a token. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\gobble#1{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The following is used inside several \edef's. | 
|  | \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Hyphenation fixes. | 
|  | \hyphenation{ | 
|  | Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | 
|  | data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script | 
|  | man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | 
|  | par-a-digms rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces | 
|  | stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space | 
|  | wide-spread wrap-around | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | 
|  | \newdimen\bindingoffset | 
|  | \newdimen\normaloffset | 
|  | \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For a final copy, take out the rectangles | 
|  | % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | 
|  | % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should | 
|  | % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the | 
|  | % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would | 
|  | % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | 
|  | % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\|{% | 
|  | % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | 
|  | \vadjust{% | 
|  | % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | 
|  | % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | 
|  | \vskip-\baselineskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So | 
|  | % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | 
|  | \llap{% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | 
|  | \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This is the space between the bar and the text. | 
|  | \hskip 12pt | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file | 
|  | % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here, | 
|  | % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make | 
|  | % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | 
|  | % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | 
|  | \def\loggingall{% | 
|  | \tracingstats2 | 
|  | \tracingpages1 | 
|  | \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex | 
|  | \tracingparagraphs1 | 
|  | \tracingoutput1 | 
|  | \tracingmacros2 | 
|  | \tracingrestores1 | 
|  | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | 
|  | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging | 
|  | \tracingscantokens1 | 
|  | \tracingifs1 | 
|  | \tracinggroups1 | 
|  | \tracingnesting2 | 
|  | \tracingassigns1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex | 
|  | \errorcontextlines16 | 
|  | }% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing | 
|  | % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount | 
|  | \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | 
|  | \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | 
|  | \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | 
|  | \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | 
|  | \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For @cropmarks command. | 
|  | % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\ifcropmarks | 
|  | \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | 
|  | % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | 
|  | \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc | 
|  | \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | 
|  | \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Main output routine. | 
|  | \chardef\PAGE = 255 | 
|  | \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newbox\headlinebox | 
|  | \newbox\footlinebox | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents | 
|  | % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | 
|  | \def\onepageout#1{% | 
|  | \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | 
|  | \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | 
|  | % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | 
|  | \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | 
|  | \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | 
|  | % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | 
|  | % before the \shipout runs. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files. | 
|  | \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output. | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | 
|  | % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. | 
|  | \shipout\vbox{% | 
|  | % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | 
|  | \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | 
|  | \hsize = \outerhsize | 
|  | \vskip-\topandbottommargin | 
|  | \vtop to0pt{% | 
|  | \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | 
|  | \nointerlineskip | 
|  | \line{% | 
|  | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | 
|  | \hfill | 
|  | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \vss}% | 
|  | \vskip\topandbottommargin | 
|  | \line\bgroup | 
|  | \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | 
|  | \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | 
|  | \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \unvbox\headlinebox | 
|  | \pagebody{#1}% | 
|  | \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | 
|  | % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | 
|  | % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) | 
|  | % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | 
|  | \vskip 2\baselineskip | 
|  | \unvbox\footlinebox | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifcropmarks | 
|  | \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | 
|  | \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | 
|  | \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | 
|  | \vbox to0pt{\vss | 
|  | \line{% | 
|  | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | 
|  | \hfill | 
|  | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \nointerlineskip | 
|  | \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% end of \shipout\vbox | 
|  | }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive | 
|  | \advancepageno | 
|  | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | 
|  | {\catcode`\@ =11 | 
|  | \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | 
|  | % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | 
|  | \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | 
|  | \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | 
|  | \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 | 
|  | \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | 
|  | \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are | 
|  | % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | 
|  | % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | 
|  | \def\nstop{\vbox | 
|  | {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | 
|  | \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | 
|  | \def\nsbot{\vbox | 
|  | {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of | 
|  | % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a | 
|  | % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} | 
|  | \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | 
|  | \def\next{#2}% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \obeylines | 
|  | \spaceisspace | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\obeylines % | 
|  | \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | 
|  | \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | 
|  | \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. | 
|  | \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | 
|  | \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | 
|  | %    @end itemize  @c foo | 
|  | % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed | 
|  | % by \finishparsearg. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | 
|  | \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | 
|  | \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#3}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty | 
|  | % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run; | 
|  | % thus we reuse \temp. | 
|  | \let\temp\finishparsearg | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\temp\argcheckspaces | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Put the space token in: | 
|  | \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so | 
|  | % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | 
|  | % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | 
|  | % just before passing the control to \next. | 
|  | % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is | 
|  | % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger | 
|  | % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \parseargdef\foo{...} | 
|  | %	is roughly equivalent to | 
|  | % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | 
|  | % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | 
|  | % favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03 | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\parseargdef#1{% | 
|  | \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | 
|  | \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | 
|  | \def#1##1% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Several utility definitions with active space: | 
|  | { | 
|  | \obeyspaces | 
|  | \gdef\obeyedspace{ } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | 
|  | % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | 
|  | % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | 
|  | % should produce a line of output anyway. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | 
|  | % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | 
|  | % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | 
|  | \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this: | 
|  | % | 
|  | %   \envdef\foo{...} | 
|  | %   \def\Efoo{...} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the | 
|  | % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also | 
|  | % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | 
|  | % whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be | 
|  | % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they | 
|  | % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The | 
|  | % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this | 
|  | % special case.) | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % At runtime, environments start with this: | 
|  | \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} | 
|  | % initialize | 
|  | \let\thisenv\empty | 
|  |  | 
|  | % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': | 
|  | \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | 
|  | \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Check whether we're in the right environment: | 
|  | \def\checkenv#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\thisenv\temp | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \badenverr | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: | 
|  | \def\badenverr{% | 
|  | \errhelp = \EMsimple | 
|  | \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, | 
|  | not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\inenvironment#1{% | 
|  | \ifx#1\empty | 
|  | out of any environment% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | in environment \expandafter\string#1% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | 
|  | % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\end{% | 
|  | \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 | 
|  | \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | 
|  | \csname E#1\endcsname | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | %% Simple single-character @ commands | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @@ prints an @ | 
|  | % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | 
|  | \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is turned off because it was never documented | 
|  | % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | 
|  | %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | 
|  | %% but suppressing ligatures. | 
|  | %\def\`{{`}} | 
|  | %\def\'{{'}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used to generate quoted braces. | 
|  | \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | 
|  | \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | 
|  | \let\{=\mylbrace | 
|  | \let\}=\myrbrace | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, | 
|  | % and @{ and @} for the aux file. | 
|  | \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | 
|  | \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 | 
|  | \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other | 
|  | !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | 
|  | !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | 
|  | !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | 
|  | !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | 
|  | !endgroup | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | 
|  | \let\comma = , | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | 
|  | % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. | 
|  | \let\, = \c | 
|  | \let\dotaccent = \. | 
|  | \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | 
|  | \let\tieaccent = \t | 
|  | \let\ubaraccent = \b | 
|  | \let\udotaccent = \d | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm | 
|  | % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | 
|  | \def\questiondown{?`} | 
|  | \def\exclamdown{!`} | 
|  | \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} | 
|  | \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | 
|  | \def\imacro{i} | 
|  | \def\jmacro{j} | 
|  | \def\dotless#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi | 
|  | \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j | 
|  | \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | 
|  | \fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a | 
|  | % period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in | 
|  | % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | 
|  | % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | 
|  | % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | 
|  | % \scriptscriptstyle). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\LaTeX{% | 
|  | L\kern-.36em | 
|  | {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | 
|  | \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% | 
|  | \kern-.15em | 
|  | \TeX | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space | 
|  | % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | 
|  | % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | 
|  | % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | 
|  | % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | 
|  | {\catcode`@ = 11 | 
|  | % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | 
|  | % if the definition is written into an index file. | 
|  | \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | 
|  | \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | 
|  | \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @* forces a line break. | 
|  | \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @/ allows a line break. | 
|  | \let\/=\allowbreak | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @. is an end-of-sentence period. | 
|  | \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | 
|  | \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | 
|  | \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | 
|  | % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | 
|  | % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | 
|  | \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | 
|  | % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | 
|  | % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for | 
|  | % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | 
|  | % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large, | 
|  | % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | 
|  | % the text is small, which looks bad. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can | 
|  | % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | 
|  | % does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an | 
|  | % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The | 
|  | % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | 
|  | % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newbox\groupbox | 
|  | \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envdef\group{% | 
|  | \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | 
|  | \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp | 
|  | \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \startsavinginserts | 
|  | % | 
|  | \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup | 
|  | % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as | 
|  | % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | 
|  | % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after | 
|  | % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group | 
|  | % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | 
|  | % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | 
|  | \comment | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts | 
|  | % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | 
|  | % \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | 
|  | % above.  But it's pretty close. | 
|  | \def\Egroup{% | 
|  | % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | 
|  | % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | 
|  | \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | 
|  | \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | 
|  | \egroup           % End the \vtop. | 
|  | % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | 
|  | \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | 
|  | % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | 
|  | \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | 
|  | % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | 
|  | % group, force a page break. | 
|  | \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | 
|  | \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | 
|  | \page | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \box\groupbox | 
|  | \prevdepth = \dimen1 | 
|  | \checkinserts | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help | 
|  | % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | 
|  | group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | 
|  | where each line of input produces a line of output.} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @need space-in-mils | 
|  | % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Old definition--didn't work. | 
|  | %\parseargdef\need{\par % | 
|  | %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally | 
|  | %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | 
|  | %{\baselineskip=0pt% | 
|  | %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | 
|  | %\prevdepth=-1000pt | 
|  | %}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\need{% | 
|  | % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a | 
|  | % paragraph. | 
|  | \par | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | 
|  | \dimen0 = #1\mil | 
|  | \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | 
|  | \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | 
|  | \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | 
|  | % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | 
|  | % And a page break here is fine. | 
|  | \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | 
|  | % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the | 
|  | % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | 
|  | % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | 
|  | % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | 
|  | % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | 
|  | % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | 
|  | % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | 
|  | % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an | 
|  | % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | 
|  | % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | 
|  | \penalty9999 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | 
|  | \kern -#1\mil | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\br = \par | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @page forces the start of a new page. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @exdent text.... | 
|  | % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | 
|  | % That's how much \exdent should take out. | 
|  | \newskip\exdentamount | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | 
|  | \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | 
|  | \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount | 
|  | \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | 
|  | % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | 
|  | % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | 
|  | \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \kern-\strutdepth | 
|  | \vtop to \strutdepth{% | 
|  | \baselineskip=\strutdepth | 
|  | \vss | 
|  | % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | 
|  | % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | 
|  | \ifx#1l% | 
|  | \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \null | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }} | 
|  | \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | 
|  | \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | 
|  | % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | 
|  | % else use TEXT for both). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | 
|  | \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts | 
|  | \def\righttext{#2}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text | 
|  | \def\righttext{#1}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifodd\pageno | 
|  | \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @include file    insert text of that file as input. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | 
|  | \def\includezzz#1{% | 
|  | \pushthisfilestack | 
|  | \def\thisfile{#1}% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \def\temp{\input #1 }% | 
|  | \expandafter | 
|  | }\temp | 
|  | \popthisfilestack | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\filenamecatcodes{% | 
|  | \catcode`\\=\other | 
|  | \catcode`~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`+=\other | 
|  | \catcode`-=\other | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\pushthisfilestack{% | 
|  | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | 
|  | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | 
|  | \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} | 
|  | \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | 
|  | the stack of filenames is empty.}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\thisfile{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @center line | 
|  | % outputs that line, centered. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\center{% | 
|  | \ifhmode | 
|  | \let\next\centerH | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\next\centerV | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\centerH#1{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \hfil\break | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | 
|  | \line{#1}% | 
|  | \break | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @comment ...line which is ignored... | 
|  | % @c is the same as @comment | 
|  | % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | 
|  | \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | 
|  | \commentxxx} | 
|  | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\c=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @paragraphindent NCHARS | 
|  | % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | 
|  | % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. | 
|  | % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords | 
|  | \def\noneword{none} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\asisword | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifx\temp\noneword | 
|  | \defaultparindent = 0pt | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \defaultparindent = #1em | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \parindent = \defaultparindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @exampleindent NCHARS | 
|  | % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | 
|  | % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | 
|  | % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | 
|  | \parseargdef\exampleindent{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\asisword | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifx\temp\noneword | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = 0pt | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = #1em | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @firstparagraphindent WORD | 
|  | % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | 
|  | % after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | 
|  | % paragraphs. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling | 
|  | % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | 
|  | % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | 
|  | % By default, we suppress indentation. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
|  | \def\insertword{insert} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\noneword | 
|  | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | 
|  | \else\ifx\temp\insertword | 
|  | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \errhelp = \EMsimple | 
|  | \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | 
|  | \fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to | 
|  | % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next | 
|  | % paragraph. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | 
|  | \gdef\indent{% | 
|  | \restorefirstparagraphindent | 
|  | \indent | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \gdef\noindent{% | 
|  | \restorefirstparagraphindent | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \global\everypar = {% | 
|  | \kern -\parindent | 
|  | \restorefirstparagraphindent | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% | 
|  | \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | 
|  | \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | 
|  | \global \everypar = {}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\asis#1{#1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @math outputs its argument in math mode. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | 
|  | % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make | 
|  | % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, | 
|  | % which is what @var uses. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode\underChar = \active | 
|  | \gdef\mathunderscore{% | 
|  | \catcode\underChar=\active | 
|  | \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | } | 
|  | % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. | 
|  | % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but | 
|  | % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not | 
|  | % otherwise define @\. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. | 
|  | \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\math{% | 
|  | \tex | 
|  | \mathunderscore | 
|  | \let\\ = \mathbackslash | 
|  | \mathactive | 
|  | $\finishmath | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | 
|  | % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | 
|  | % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | 
|  | % | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`^ = \active | 
|  | \catcode`< = \active | 
|  | \catcode`> = \active | 
|  | \catcode`+ = \active | 
|  | \gdef\mathactive{% | 
|  | \let^ = \ptexhat | 
|  | \let< = \ptexless | 
|  | \let> = \ptexgtr | 
|  | \let+ = \ptexplus | 
|  | } | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. | 
|  | \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} | 
|  | \def\minus{$-$} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | 
|  | % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter | 
|  | % font as three actual period characters. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dots{% | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | \hbox to 1.5em{% | 
|  | \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil | 
|  | .\hfil.\hfil.% | 
|  | \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\enddots{% | 
|  | \dots | 
|  | \spacefactor=3000 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up | 
|  | % Texinfo's parsing. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\comma = , | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @refill is a no-op. | 
|  | \let\refill=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | 
|  | % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | 
|  | % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | 
|  | \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | 
|  | % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | 
|  | % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | 
|  | \def\setfilename{% | 
|  | \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \tryauxfile | 
|  | % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit. | 
|  | \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | 
|  | \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. | 
|  | \openindices | 
|  | \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | 
|  | % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | 
|  | \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Called from \setfilename. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\openindices{% | 
|  | \newindex{cp}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{fn}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{vr}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{tp}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{ky}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{pg}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @bye. | 
|  | \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{pdf,} | 
|  | % adobe `portable' document format | 
|  | \newcount\tempnum | 
|  | \newcount\lnkcount | 
|  | \newtoks\filename | 
|  | \newcount\filenamelength | 
|  | \newcount\pgn | 
|  | \newtoks\toksA | 
|  | \newtoks\toksB | 
|  | \newtoks\toksC | 
|  | \newtoks\toksD | 
|  | \newbox\boxA | 
|  | \newcount\countA | 
|  | \newif\ifpdf | 
|  | \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | 
|  |  | 
|  | \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined | 
|  | \pdffalse | 
|  | \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | 
|  | \let\pdfurl = \gobble | 
|  | \let\endlink = \relax | 
|  | \let\linkcolor = \relax | 
|  | \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \pdftrue | 
|  | \pdfoutput = 1 | 
|  | \input pdfcolor | 
|  | \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% | 
|  | \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \def\imagewidth{#2}% | 
|  | \def\imageheight{#3}% | 
|  | % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is | 
|  | % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | 
|  | \immediate\pdfimage | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \immediate\pdfximage | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi | 
|  | \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 | 
|  | #1.pdf% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | {#1.pdf}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | 
|  | \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  | \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% | 
|  | % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title | 
|  | % aren't expanded. | 
|  | \atdummies | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive | 
|  | \pdfdest name{#1} xyz% | 
|  | }} | 
|  | \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} | 
|  | \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light? | 
|  | \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} | 
|  | % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | 
|  | % come from Petr Olsak | 
|  | \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | 
|  | \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | 
|  | \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | 
|  | \advance\tempnum by 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the section text.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number | 
|  | % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node | 
|  | % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no | 
|  | % corresponding node.  #4 is the page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% | 
|  | % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | 
|  | % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section | 
|  | % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | 
|  | % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured. | 
|  | \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | 
|  | \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks | 
|  | \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace | 
|  | \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. | 
|  | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \def\thischapnum{##2}% | 
|  | \let\thissecnum\empty | 
|  | \let\thissubsecnum\empty | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | 
|  | \def\thissecnum{##2}% | 
|  | \let\thissubsecnum\empty | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | 
|  | \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \let\thischapnum\empty | 
|  | \let\thissecnum\empty | 
|  | \let\thissubsecnum\empty | 
|  | % | 
|  | % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | 
|  | % al. a second time, below. | 
|  | \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | 
|  | \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | 
|  | \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | 
|  | \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | 
|  | \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | 
|  | \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | 
|  | \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | 
|  | \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | 
|  | % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | 
|  | % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We use the node names as the destinations. | 
|  | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | 
|  | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | 
|  | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | 
|  | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | 
|  | \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | 
|  | % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters, | 
|  | % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from | 
|  | % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from | 
|  | % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to | 
|  | % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right | 
|  | % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. | 
|  | \indexnofonts | 
|  | \turnoffactive | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\makelinks #1,{% | 
|  | \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% | 
|  | \ifx\params\E | 
|  | \let\nextmakelinks=\relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks | 
|  | \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi | 
|  | \picknum{#1}% | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} | 
|  | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% | 
|  | \linkcolor #1% | 
|  | \advance\lnkcount by 1% | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \nextmakelinks | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} | 
|  | \def\pn#1{% | 
|  | \def\p{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\p\lbrace | 
|  | \let\nextpn=\ppn | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\nextpn=\ppnn | 
|  | \def\first{#1} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \nextpn | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} | 
|  | \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} | 
|  | \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} | 
|  | \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% | 
|  | \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | 
|  | \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | 
|  | \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | 
|  | \advance\filenamelength by 1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \nextsp} | 
|  | \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | 
|  | \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \def\pdfurl#1{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \leavevmode\Red | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
|  | user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  | \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | 
|  | \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | 
|  | \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | 
|  | \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | 
|  | \def\maketoks{% | 
|  | \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax | 
|  | \ifx\first0\adn0 | 
|  | \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | 
|  | \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | 
|  | \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | 
|  | \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | 
|  | \let\next=\maketoks | 
|  | \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | 
|  | \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | 
|  | \next} | 
|  | \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | 
|  | {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | 
|  | \def\pdflink#1{% | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} | 
|  | \linkcolor #1\endlink} | 
|  | \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | 
|  | \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{fonts,} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | 
|  | % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | 
|  | % italics, not bold italics. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setfontstyle#1{% | 
|  | \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | 
|  | \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | 
|  | \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | 
|  | \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | 
|  | \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}} | 
|  | \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | 
|  | % So we set up a \sf. | 
|  | \newfam\sffam | 
|  | \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} | 
|  | \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We don't need math for this font style. | 
|  | \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Default leading. | 
|  | \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | 
|  | % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | 
|  | % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | 
|  | \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | 
|  | \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setleading#1{% | 
|  | \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax | 
|  | \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | 
|  | \normalbaselines | 
|  | \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | 
|  | \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | 
|  | depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the | 
|  | % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | 
|  | % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor | 
|  | \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use cm as the default font prefix. | 
|  | % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | 
|  | % before you read in texinfo.tex. | 
|  | \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | 
|  | \def\fontprefix{cm} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | 
|  | \def\rmshape{r} | 
|  | \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold | 
|  | \def\bfshape{b} | 
|  | \def\bxshape{bx} | 
|  | \def\ttshape{tt} | 
|  | \def\ttbshape{tt} | 
|  | \def\ttslshape{sltt} | 
|  | \def\itshape{ti} | 
|  | \def\itbshape{bxti} | 
|  | \def\slshape{sl} | 
|  | \def\slbshape{bxsl} | 
|  | \def\sfshape{ss} | 
|  | \def\sfbshape{ss} | 
|  | \def\scshape{csc} | 
|  | \def\scbshape{csc} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). | 
|  | \newcount\mainmagstep | 
|  | \ifx\bigger\relax | 
|  | % not really supported. | 
|  | \mainmagstep=\magstep1 | 
|  | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \mainmagstep=\magstephalf | 
|  | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | 
|  | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | 
|  |  | 
|  | % A few fonts for @defun names and args. | 
|  | \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | 
|  | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} | 
|  | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} | 
|  | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} | 
|  | \font\smalli=cmmi9 | 
|  | \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for small examples (8pt). | 
|  | \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} | 
|  | \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} | 
|  | \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} | 
|  | \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | 
|  | \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): | 
|  | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \let\titlebf=\titlerm | 
|  | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | 
|  | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | 
|  | \def\authorrm{\secrm} | 
|  | \def\authortt{\sectt} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | 
|  | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} | 
|  | \let\chapbf=\chaprm | 
|  | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | 
|  | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Section fonts (14.4pt). | 
|  | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \let\secbf\secrm | 
|  | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | 
|  | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | 
|  | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
|  | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | 
|  | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf | 
|  | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | 
|  | \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} | 
|  | \font\reducedi=cmmi10 | 
|  | \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, | 
|  | % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since | 
|  | % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except | 
|  | % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | 
|  | % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\resetmathfonts{% | 
|  | \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy | 
|  | \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | 
|  | \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | 
|  | % of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the | 
|  | % current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | 
|  | % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) | 
|  | % and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in | 
|  | % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This all needs generalizing, badly. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\textfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} | 
|  | \def\titlefonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} | 
|  | \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | 
|  | \def\chapfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} | 
|  | \def\secfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} | 
|  | \def\subsecfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} | 
|  | \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts | 
|  | \def\reducedfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | 
|  | \def\smallfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | 
|  | \def\smallerfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | 
|  | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. | 
|  | \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | 
|  |  | 
|  | % About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | 
|  | % can fit this many characters: | 
|  | %   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69 | 
|  | % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | 
|  | %   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77 | 
|  | % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | 
|  | % the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | 
|  | %   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % I wish the USA used A4 paper. | 
|  | % --karl, 24jan03. | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \textfonts \rm | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | 
|  | \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | 
|  | \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | 
|  | \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for short table of contents. | 
|  | \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12 | 
|  | \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | 
|  | %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | 
|  | % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | 
|  | \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else | 
|  | \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} | 
|  | \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
|  | \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. | 
|  | % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | 
|  | \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want | 
|  | % ttsl for book titles, do we? | 
|  | \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\i=\smartitalic | 
|  | \let\var=\smartslanted | 
|  | \let\dfn=\smartslanted | 
|  | \let\emph=\smartitalic | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} | 
|  | \let\strong=\b | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at | 
|  | % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | 
|  | % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | 
|  | \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. | 
|  | % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | 
|  | % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \catcode`@=11 | 
|  | \def\frenchspacing{% | 
|  | \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | 
|  | \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | 
|  | } | 
|  | \catcode`@=\other | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\t#1{% | 
|  | {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% | 
|  | \null | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} | 
|  | \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \font\keysy=cmsy9 | 
|  | \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | 
|  | \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | 
|  | \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | 
|  | \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | 
|  | \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | 
|  | \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | 
|  | % The old definition, with no lozenge: | 
|  | %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | 
|  | \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | 
|  | \let\file=\samp | 
|  | \let\option=\samp | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @code is a modification of @t, | 
|  | % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | 
|  | \def\tclose#1{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | 
|  | \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Switch to typewriter. | 
|  | \tt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | 
|  | \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Turn off hyphenation. | 
|  | \nohyphenation | 
|  | % | 
|  | \rawbackslash | 
|  | \frenchspacing | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \null | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. | 
|  | % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes | 
|  | % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | 
|  | % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | 
|  | % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | 
|  | % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | 
|  | %  -- rms. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`\-=\active | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active | 
|  | % | 
|  | \global\def\code{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder | 
|  | \codex | 
|  | } | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\realdash{-} | 
|  | \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | 
|  | \def\codeunder{% | 
|  | % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _ | 
|  | % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | 
|  | % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | 
|  | % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | 
|  | \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | 
|  | \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | 
|  | \else\normalunderscore \fi | 
|  | \discretionary{}{}{}}% | 
|  | {\_}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, | 
|  | % then @kbd has no effect. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | 
|  | %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | 
|  | %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | 
|  | \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% | 
|  | \def\arg{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\arg\worddistinct | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\arg\wordexample | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\arg\wordcode | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \errhelp = \EMsimple | 
|  | \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}% | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\worddistinct{distinct} | 
|  | \def\wordexample{example} | 
|  | \def\wordcode{code} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Default is `distinct.' | 
|  | \kbdinputstyle distinct | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\xkey{\key} | 
|  | \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | 
|  | \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | 
|  | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | 
|  | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. | 
|  | \let\url=\code | 
|  | \let\env=\code | 
|  | \let\command=\code | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | 
|  | % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | 
|  | % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | 
|  | % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in | 
|  | % a hypertex \special here. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | \pdfurl{#1}% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | 
|  | \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. | 
|  | % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | 
|  | % | 
|  | %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\email=\uref | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the | 
|  | % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | 
|  | % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | 
|  | % this property, we can check that font parameter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the | 
|  | % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | 
|  | % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for | 
|  | % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96. | 
|  | %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | 
|  | \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font | 
|  | \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font | 
|  | \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | 
|  | {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | 
|  | \def\temp{#2}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty \else | 
|  | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which is in the CM italic font. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\pounds{{\it\$}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really | 
|  | % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | 
|  | % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\registeredsymbol{% | 
|  | $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | 
|  | \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | 
|  | }$% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{page headings,} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | 
|  | \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | 
|  |  | 
|  | % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | 
|  | \newif\ifseenauthor | 
|  | \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | 
|  | % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | 
|  | \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% | 
|  | \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \envdef\titlepage{% | 
|  | % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \parindent=0pt \textfonts | 
|  | % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | 
|  | \vglue\titlepagetopglue | 
|  | % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | 
|  | \finishedtitlepagetrue | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | 
|  | % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second. | 
|  | \let\oldpage = \page | 
|  | \def\page{% | 
|  | \iffinishedtitlepage\else | 
|  | \finishtitlepage | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \let\page = \oldpage | 
|  | \page | 
|  | \null | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Etitlepage{% | 
|  | \iffinishedtitlepage\else | 
|  | \finishtitlepage | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | 
|  | % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | 
|  | % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | 
|  | % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | 
|  | \oldpage | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | 
|  | % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | 
|  | \HEADINGSon | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | 
|  | \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \shortcontents | 
|  | \contents | 
|  | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | 
|  | \global\let\contents = \relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \contents | 
|  | \global\let\contents = \relax | 
|  | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\finishtitlepage{% | 
|  | \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize | 
|  | \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | 
|  | \finishedtitlepagetrue | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | 
|  | \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines | 
|  | \let\tt=\authortt} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\title{% | 
|  | \checkenv\titlepage | 
|  | \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} | 
|  | % print a rule at the page bottom also. | 
|  | \finishedtitlepagefalse | 
|  | \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\subtitle{% | 
|  | \checkenv\titlepage | 
|  | {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @author should come last, but may come many times. | 
|  | % It can also be used inside @quotation. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\author{% | 
|  | \def\temp{\quotation}% | 
|  | \ifx\thisenv\temp | 
|  | \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \checkenv\titlepage | 
|  | \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | 
|  | {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Set up page headings and footings. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\thispage=\folio | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages | 
|  | \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages | 
|  | \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages | 
|  | \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Now make TeX use those variables | 
|  | \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline | 
|  | \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | 
|  | \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | 
|  | \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | 
|  | \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Commands to set those variables. | 
|  | % For example, this is what  @headings on  does | 
|  | % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | 
|  | % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | 
|  | % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | 
|  | % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} | 
|  | \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | 
|  | \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} | 
|  | \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | 
|  | \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | 
|  | \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | 
|  | \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} | 
|  | \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | 
|  | \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume | 
|  | % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | 
|  | \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip | 
|  | \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing. | 
|  | % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing. | 
|  | % @headings off         turns them off. | 
|  | % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | 
|  | % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page. | 
|  | % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | 
|  | % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | 
|  | % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | 
|  | % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSoff{% | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | 
|  | \HEADINGSoff | 
|  | % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | 
|  | % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | 
|  | % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | 
|  | % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | 
|  | % edge of all pages. | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSdouble{% | 
|  | \global\pageno=1 | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | 
|  | % page number on top right. | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSsingle{% | 
|  | \global\pageno=1 | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | 
|  | \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subroutines used in generating headings | 
|  | % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | 
|  | % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | 
|  | % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | 
|  | \ifx\today\undefined | 
|  | \def\today{% | 
|  | \number\day\space | 
|  | \ifcase\month | 
|  | \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | 
|  | \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | 
|  | \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \space\number\year} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings. | 
|  | % It generates no output of its own. | 
|  | \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | 
|  | \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{tables,} | 
|  | % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). | 
|  |  | 
|  | % default indentation of table text | 
|  | \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | 
|  | % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | 
|  | \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in | 
|  | % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | 
|  | \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | 
|  | \newdimen\itemmax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with | 
|  | % these defs. | 
|  | % They also define \itemindex | 
|  | % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | 
|  | \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% | 
|  | \itemindex{#1}% | 
|  | \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | 
|  | % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | 
|  | % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | 
|  | % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | 
|  | % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | 
|  | \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | 
|  | % but leave it ragged-right. | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | 
|  | \advance\hsize by\tableindent | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | 
|  | \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | 
|  | % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | 
|  | \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  (Unfortunately | 
|  | % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following | 
|  | % \baselineskip glue.)  However, if what follows is an environment | 
|  | % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then | 
|  | % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to | 
|  | % crash together.  So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal | 
|  | % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all. | 
|  | % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by | 
|  | % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or | 
|  | % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be | 
|  | % penalty 10001...) | 
|  | \penalty 10001 | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the | 
|  | % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | 
|  | % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | 
|  | % eventually be printed. | 
|  | \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | 
|  | \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | 
|  | \unhbox0 | 
|  | \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} | 
|  | \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | 
|  | \envdef\table{% | 
|  | \let\itemindex\gobble | 
|  | \tablex | 
|  | } | 
|  | \envdef\ftable{% | 
|  | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | 
|  | \tablex | 
|  | } | 
|  | \envdef\vtable{% | 
|  | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | 
|  | \tablex | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\tablex#1{% | 
|  | \def\itemindicate{#1}% | 
|  | \parsearg\tabley | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\tabley#1{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | 
|  | \expandafter | 
|  | }\temp \endtablez | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | 
|  | \aboveenvbreak | 
|  | \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | 
|  | \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | 
|  | \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | 
|  | \itemmax=\tableindent | 
|  | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | 
|  | \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\tableindent | 
|  | \parindent = 0pt | 
|  | \parskip = \smallskipamount | 
|  | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | 
|  | \let\item = \internalBitem | 
|  | \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | 
|  | \let\Eftable\Etable | 
|  | \let\Evtable\Etable | 
|  | \let\Eitemize\Etable | 
|  | \let\Eenumerate\Etable | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount \itemno | 
|  |  | 
|  | \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\doitemize#1{% | 
|  | \aboveenvbreak | 
|  | \itemmax=\itemindent | 
|  | \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\itemindent | 
|  | \parindent=0pt | 
|  | \parskip=\smallskipamount | 
|  | \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | 
|  | \def\itemcontents{#1}% | 
|  | % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. | 
|  | \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | 
|  | \let\item=\itemizeitem | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\itemizeitem{% | 
|  | \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations | 
|  | {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | 
|  | % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | 
|  | % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero | 
|  | % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the | 
|  | % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | 
|  | % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | 
|  | % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least | 
|  | % that's the theory. | 
|  | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | 
|  | \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. | 
|  | \flushcr | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | 
|  | % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | 
|  | % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No | 
|  | % argument is the same as `1'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey} | 
|  | \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% | 
|  | % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | 
|  | \def\thearg{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a | 
|  | % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | 
|  | % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | 
|  | % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | 
|  | % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | 
|  | \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | 
|  | \ifx\rest\empty | 
|  | % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything. | 
|  | % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | 
|  | % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | 
|  | %   not equal to itself. | 
|  | % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | 
|  | % continuing to look for a <number>. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | 
|  | \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % It's a letter. | 
|  | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | 
|  | \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number. | 
|  | \numericenumerate | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is | 
|  | % given in \thearg. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\numericenumerate{% | 
|  | \itemno = \thearg | 
|  | \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | 
|  | \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | 
|  | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | 
|  | \startenumeration{% | 
|  | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | 
|  | \ifnum\itemno=0 | 
|  | \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | 
|  | alphabet}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \char\lccode\itemno | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | 
|  | \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | 
|  | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | 
|  | \startenumeration{% | 
|  | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | 
|  | \ifnum\itemno=0 | 
|  | \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | 
|  | alphabet} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \char\uccode\itemno | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the | 
|  | % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in | 
|  | % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\startenumeration#1{% | 
|  | \advance\itemno by -1 | 
|  | \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | 
|  | % to @enumerate. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | 
|  | \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | 
|  | \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | 
|  | \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @multitable macros | 
|  | % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | 
|  | % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width | 
|  | % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | 
|  | % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % To make preamble: | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | 
|  | %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | 
|  | %   @item ... | 
|  | % | 
|  | %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | 
|  | %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | 
|  | %   columns as desired. | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Or use a template: | 
|  | %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | 
|  | %   @item ... | 
|  | %   using the widest term desired in each column. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | 
|  | % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | 
|  | % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | 
|  | % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt | 
|  | % if they are. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sample multitable: | 
|  |  | 
|  | %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | 
|  | %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | 
|  | %   @item | 
|  | %   first col stuff | 
|  | %   @tab | 
|  | %   second col stuff | 
|  | %   @tab | 
|  | %   third col | 
|  | %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | 
|  | %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | 
|  | % | 
|  | %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | 
|  | %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | 
|  | %   @end multitable | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | 
|  | % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | 
|  | % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | 
|  | % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | 
|  | % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | 
|  | %                                                            to baseline. | 
|  | %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\multitableparskip | 
|  | \newskip\multitableparindent | 
|  | \newdimen\multitablecolspace | 
|  | \newskip\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \multitableparskip=0pt | 
|  | \multitableparindent=6pt | 
|  | \multitablecolspace=12pt | 
|  | \multitablelinespace=0pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\endsetuptable\relax | 
|  | \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | 
|  | \let\columnfractions\relax | 
|  | \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | 
|  | \newif\ifsetpercent | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might | 
|  | % be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% | 
|  | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% | 
|  | \setuptable | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\colcount | 
|  | \def\setuptable#1{% | 
|  | \def\firstarg{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | 
|  | \let\go = \relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | 
|  | \global\setpercenttrue | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifsetpercent | 
|  | \let\go\pickupwholefraction | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a | 
|  | % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | 
|  | % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | 
|  | % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | 
|  | \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\go = \setuptable | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \go | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % multitable-only commands. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | 
|  | % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | 
|  | % of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab. | 
|  | \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template | 
|  | % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until | 
|  | % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. | 
|  | %					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | 
|  | \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envdef\multitable{% | 
|  | \vskip\parskip | 
|  | \startsavinginserts | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | 
|  | \let\item\crcr | 
|  | % | 
|  | \tolerance=9500 | 
|  | \hbadness=9500 | 
|  | \setmultitablespacing | 
|  | \parskip=\multitableparskip | 
|  | \parindent=\multitableparindent | 
|  | \overfullrule=0pt | 
|  | \global\colcount=0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \everycr = {% | 
|  | \noalign{% | 
|  | \global\everytab={}% | 
|  | \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | 
|  | % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | 
|  | \checkinserts | 
|  | % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | 
|  | %\filbreak | 
|  | % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | 
|  | % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the | 
|  | % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parsearg\domultitable | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\domultitable#1{% | 
|  | % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: | 
|  | \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | 
|  | % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | 
|  | % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | 
|  | % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | 
|  | \halign\bgroup &% | 
|  | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | 
|  | \multistrut | 
|  | \vtop{% | 
|  | % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | 
|  | \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | 
|  | % | 
|  | % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | 
|  | % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | 
|  | % the first one. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | 
|  | % to the width of each template entry. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | 
|  | % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | 
|  | % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at | 
|  | % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | 
|  | \rightskip=0pt | 
|  | \ifnum\colcount=1 | 
|  | % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by\leftskip | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifsetpercent \else | 
|  | % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | 
|  | % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | 
|  | \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | 
|  | % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | 
|  | % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | 
|  | % For example: | 
|  | % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | 
|  | % @item @code{#} | 
|  | % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | 
|  | % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | 
|  | % marking characters. | 
|  | \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | 
|  | }\cr | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\Emultitable{% | 
|  | \crcr | 
|  | \egroup % end the \halign | 
|  | \global\setpercentfalse | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. | 
|  | % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on | 
|  | % current baselineskip. | 
|  | \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt | 
|  | \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | 
|  | \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | 
|  | %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, | 
|  | %% to keep lines equally spaced | 
|  | \let\multistrut = \strut | 
|  | \else | 
|  | %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be? | 
|  | \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 | 
|  | width0pt\relax} \fi | 
|  | %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of | 
|  | %% table. If not, do nothing. | 
|  | %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | 
|  | \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | 
|  | %% than skip between lines in the table. | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | 
|  | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | 
|  | %% than skip between lines in the table. | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{conditionals,} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | 
|  | % @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't | 
|  | % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we | 
|  | % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | 
|  | % attempt to close an environment group. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\makecond#1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | 
|  | } | 
|  | \makecond{iftex} | 
|  | \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | 
|  | \makecond{ifnothtml} | 
|  | \makecond{ifnotinfo} | 
|  | \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | 
|  | \makecond{ifnotxml} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | 
|  | \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | 
|  | \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | 
|  | \def\html{\doignore{html}} | 
|  | \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | 
|  | \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} | 
|  | \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} | 
|  | \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} | 
|  | \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} | 
|  | \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} | 
|  | \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | 
|  | \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} | 
|  | \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % A count to remember the depth of nesting. | 
|  | \newcount\doignorecount | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\doignore#1{\begingroup | 
|  | % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = \other | 
|  | \catcode`\{ = \other | 
|  | \catcode`\} = \other | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | 
|  | \spaceisspace | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | 
|  | \doignorecount = 0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | 
|  | \dodoignore {#1}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. | 
|  | \obeylines % | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\dodoignore#1{% | 
|  | % #1 contains the string `ifinfo'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line | 
|  | % by itself. | 
|  | \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | 
|  | % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | 
|  | % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | 
|  | % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | 
|  | \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % And now expand that command. | 
|  | \obeylines % | 
|  | \doignoretext ^^M% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found. | 
|  | \let\next\doignoretextzzz | 
|  | \else					% Found a nested condition, ... | 
|  | \advance\doignorecount by 1 | 
|  | \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another. | 
|  | % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | 
|  | \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end. | 
|  | \let\next\enddoignore | 
|  | \else				% Still inside a nested condition. | 
|  | \advance\doignorecount by -1 | 
|  | \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end. | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \next | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Finish off ignored text. | 
|  | \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | 
|  | % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | 
|  | % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | 
|  | % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | 
|  | % didn't need it. | 
|  | % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | 
|  | \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \def\temp{#2}% | 
|  | \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty | 
|  | \next{}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  | % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | 
|  | \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\clear{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | 
|  | \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} | 
|  | \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% | 
|  | \let\value = \expandablevalue | 
|  | % We don't want these characters active, ... | 
|  | \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | 
|  | % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | 
|  | % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | 
|  | \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | 
|  | } | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | 
|  | % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). | 
|  | % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | 
|  | % the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the | 
|  | % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | 
|  | % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | 
|  | % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\expandablevalue#1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | 
|  | {[No value for ``#1'']}% | 
|  | \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \csname SET#1\endcsname | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | 
|  | % with @set. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \makecond{ifset} | 
|  | \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | 
|  | \def\doifset#1#2{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \let\next=\empty | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | 
|  | #1% If not set, redefine \next. | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \expandafter | 
|  | }\next | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | 
|  | % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the | 
|  | % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | 
|  | % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \makecond{ifclear} | 
|  | \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | 
|  | \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file | 
|  | % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX. | 
|  | \let\dircategory=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defininfoenclose. | 
|  | \let\definfoenclose=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{indexing,} | 
|  | % Index generation facilities | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | 
|  | % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. | 
|  | {\catcode`\@=11 | 
|  | \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | 
|  | % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | 
|  | % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | 
|  | % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | 
|  | % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo. | 
|  | % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | 
|  | % for the sake of vms. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\newindex#1{% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index | 
|  | \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\newcodeindex#1{% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | 
|  | \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar. | 
|  | % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo | 
|  | % inside @code. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} | 
|  | \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | 
|  | % #3 the target index (bar). | 
|  | \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | 
|  | % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | 
|  | % closing the target index. | 
|  | \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined | 
|  | % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | 
|  | % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | 
|  | \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % redefine \fooindfile: | 
|  | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | 
|  | % redefine \fooindex: | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | 
|  | % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | 
|  | %  and it is "foo", the name of the index. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | 
|  | % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | 
|  | % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | 
|  | \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | 
|  | \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | 
|  | \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. | 
|  | % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | 
|  | % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\indexdummies{% | 
|  | \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | 
|  | \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | 
|  | % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | 
|  | % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | 
|  | % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | 
|  | \let\{ = \mylbrace | 
|  | \let\} = \myrbrace | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus | 
|  | % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control | 
|  | % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect | 
|  | % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | 
|  | % from whatever follows. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | 
|  | % space. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | 
|  | % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | 
|  | % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\definedummyword##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \def\definedummyletter##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do the redefinitions. | 
|  | \commondummies | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine | 
|  | % everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses | 
|  | % @, this will be simpler. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\atdummies{% | 
|  | \def\@{@@}% | 
|  | \def\ {@ }% | 
|  | \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | 
|  | \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | 
|  | % | 
|  | % (See comments in \indexdummies.) | 
|  | \def\definedummyword##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \def\definedummyletter##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do the redefinitions. | 
|  | \commondummies | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and | 
|  | % \definedummyletter must be defined first. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\commondummies{% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive | 
|  | % | 
|  | \commondummiesnofonts | 
|  | % | 
|  | \definedummyletter{_}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Non-English letters. | 
|  | \definedummyword{AA}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{AE}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{L}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{OE}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{O}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{aa}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{ae}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{l}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{oe}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{o}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{ss}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{exclamdown}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{questiondown}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{ordf}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{ordm}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | 
|  | \definedummyword{bf}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{gtr}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{hat}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{less}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{sf}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{sl}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{tclose}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{tt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \definedummyword{LaTeX}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{TeX}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Assorted special characters. | 
|  | \definedummyword{bullet}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{copyright}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{dots}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{enddots}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{equiv}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{error}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{expansion}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{minus}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{pounds}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{point}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{print}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{result}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | 
|  | % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Normal spaces, not active ones. | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | % | 
|  | % No macro expansion. | 
|  | \turnoffmacros | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Better have this without active chars. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{% | 
|  | % Control letters and accents. | 
|  | \definedummyletter{!}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{"}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{'}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{*}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{,}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{.}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{/}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{:}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{=}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{?}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{^}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{`}% | 
|  | \definedummyletter{~}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{u}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{v}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{H}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{dotaccent}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{ringaccent}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{tieaccent}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{ubaraccent}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{udotaccent}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{dotless}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Texinfo font commands. | 
|  | \definedummyword{b}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{i}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{r}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{sc}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{t}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Commands that take arguments. | 
|  | \definedummyword{acronym}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{cite}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{code}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{command}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{dfn}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{emph}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{env}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{file}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{kbd}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{key}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{math}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{option}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{samp}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{strong}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{tie}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{uref}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{url}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{var}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{verb}% | 
|  | \definedummyword{w}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index | 
|  | % by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all | 
|  | % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | 
|  | % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\indexnofonts{% | 
|  | \def\definedummyword##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \let\definedummyletter=\definedummyword | 
|  | % | 
|  | \commondummiesnofonts | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | 
|  | % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | 
|  | % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | 
|  | %\let\tt=\asis | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ { }% | 
|  | \def\@{@}% | 
|  | % how to handle braces? | 
|  | \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Non-English letters. | 
|  | \def\AA{AA}% | 
|  | \def\AE{AE}% | 
|  | \def\L{L}% | 
|  | \def\OE{OE}% | 
|  | \def\O{O}% | 
|  | \def\aa{aa}% | 
|  | \def\ae{ae}% | 
|  | \def\l{l}% | 
|  | \def\oe{oe}% | 
|  | \def\o{o}% | 
|  | \def\ss{ss}% | 
|  | \def\exclamdown{!}% | 
|  | \def\questiondown{?}% | 
|  | \def\ordf{a}% | 
|  | \def\ordm{o}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | 
|  | \def\TeX{TeX}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Assorted special characters. | 
|  | % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | 
|  | \def\bullet{bullet}% | 
|  | \def\copyright{copyright}% | 
|  | \def\registeredsymbol{R}% | 
|  | \def\dots{...}% | 
|  | \def\enddots{...}% | 
|  | \def\equiv{==}% | 
|  | \def\error{error}% | 
|  | \def\expansion{==>}% | 
|  | \def\minus{-}% | 
|  | \def\pounds{pounds}% | 
|  | \def\point{.}% | 
|  | \def\print{-|}% | 
|  | \def\result{=>}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex. | 
|  | \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | 
|  | % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. | 
|  | \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | 
|  | % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | 
|  | % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception | 
|  | % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | 
|  | \toks0 = {#2}% | 
|  | % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | 
|  | \def\thirdarg{#3}% | 
|  | \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifvmode | 
|  | \dosubindsanitize | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \dosubindwrite | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dosubindwrite{% | 
|  | % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. | 
|  | \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | 
|  | \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remember, we are within a group. | 
|  | \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | 
|  | \escapechar=`\\ | 
|  | \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | 
|  | % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | 
|  | % get the string to sort by. | 
|  | {\indexnofonts | 
|  | \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | 
|  | \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | 
|  | % the original text, including any font commands.  We write | 
|  | % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | 
|  | % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | 
|  | % sorted result. | 
|  | \edef\temp{% | 
|  | \write\writeto{% | 
|  | \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Take care of unwanted page breaks: | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | 
|  | % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | 
|  | % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | 
|  | % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences | 
|  | % like this: | 
|  | % @end defun | 
|  | % @tindex whatever | 
|  | % @defun ... | 
|  | % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | 
|  | % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | 
|  | % the previous defun. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We | 
|  | % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But wait, there is a catch there: | 
|  | % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not | 
|  | % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | 
|  | % of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual | 
|  | % representation of the skip. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | 
|  | % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % ..., ready, GO: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dosubindsanitize{% | 
|  | % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. | 
|  | \skip0 = \lastskip | 
|  | \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% | 
|  | \count255 = \lastpenalty | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | 
|  | % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this | 
|  | % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a | 
|  | % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential | 
|  | % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | 
|  | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \vskip-\skip0 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \dosubindwrite | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | 
|  | % if \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a | 
|  | % penalty, and perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. | 
|  | % In that case, we want to re-insert the penalty; since we | 
|  | % just inserted a non-discardable item, any following glue | 
|  | % (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example: | 
|  | %   @deffn deffn-whatever | 
|  | %   @vindex index-whatever | 
|  | %   Description. | 
|  | % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | 
|  | % and the "Description." paragraph. | 
|  | \ifnum\count255>9999 \nobreak \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | 
|  | % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | 
|  | % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | 
|  | \nobreak\vskip\skip0 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | 
|  | %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | 
|  | % or | 
|  | %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | 
|  | % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | 
|  | % containing these kinds of lines: | 
|  | %  \initial {c} | 
|  | %     before the first topic whose initial is c | 
|  | %  \entry {topic}{pagelist} | 
|  | %     for a topic that is used without subtopics | 
|  | %  \primary {topic} | 
|  | %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | 
|  | %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | 
|  | %     for each subtopic. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | 
|  | % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\findex {\fnindex} | 
|  | \def\kindex {\kyindex} | 
|  | \def\cindex {\cpindex} | 
|  | \def\vindex {\vrindex} | 
|  | \def\tindex {\tpindex} | 
|  | \def\pindex {\pgindex} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | 
|  | {\obeylines % | 
|  | \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | 
|  | \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | 
|  | % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup | 
|  | \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \smallfonts \rm | 
|  | \tolerance = 9500 | 
|  | \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | 
|  | % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | 
|  | % \initial {@} | 
|  | % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | 
|  | % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = 11 | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | 
|  | \ifeof 1 | 
|  | % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | 
|  | % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | 
|  | % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | 
|  | % there is some text. | 
|  | \putwordIndexNonexistent | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | 
|  | % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | 
|  | % it can discover if there is anything in it. | 
|  | \read 1 to \temp | 
|  | \ifeof 1 | 
|  | \putwordIndexIsEmpty | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | 
|  | % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | 
|  | % to make right now. | 
|  | \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% | 
|  | \catcode`\\ = 0 | 
|  | \escapechar = `\\ | 
|  | \begindoublecolumns | 
|  | \input \jobname.#1s | 
|  | \enddoublecolumns | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | 
|  | % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\initial#1{{% | 
|  | % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | 
|  | \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | 
|  | \removelastskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | 
|  | \penalty -300 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of | 
|  | % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | 
|  | % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | 
|  | % we need before each entry, but it's better. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | 
|  | \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | 
|  | \leftline{\secbf #1}% | 
|  | \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do our best not to break after the initial. | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and | 
|  | % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index | 
|  | % and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % A straightforward implementation would start like this: | 
|  | %	\def\entry#1#2{... | 
|  | % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to | 
|  | % @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge--- | 
|  | % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. | 
|  | %                                 --kasal, 21nov03 | 
|  | \def\entry{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | 
|  | % affect previous text. | 
|  | \par | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | 
|  | \parfillskip = 0in | 
|  | % | 
|  | % No extra space above this paragraph. | 
|  | \parskip = 0in | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | 
|  | \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | 
|  | % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the | 
|  | % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large | 
|  | % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | 
|  | % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | 
|  | % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | 
|  | \hangindent = 2em | 
|  | % | 
|  | % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | 
|  | % with blank space. | 
|  | \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | 
|  | % | 
|  | % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing | 
|  | % columns. | 
|  | \vskip 0pt plus1pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | 
|  | \afterassignment\doentry | 
|  | \let\temp = | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\doentry{% | 
|  | \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | \aftergroup\finishentry | 
|  | % And now comes the text of the entry. | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\finishentry#1{% | 
|  | % #1 is the page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if | 
|  | % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be | 
|  | % cursed by a Unix daemon. | 
|  | \def\tempa{{\rm }}% | 
|  | \def\tempb{#1}% | 
|  | \edef\tempc{\tempa}% | 
|  | \edef\tempd{\tempb}% | 
|  | \ifx\tempc\tempd | 
|  | \ % | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | 
|  | % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | 
|  | % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | 
|  | \hfil\penalty50 | 
|  | \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | 
|  | % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull | 
|  | % \hbox ensues. | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \pdfgettoks#1.% | 
|  | \ \the\toksA | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ #1% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \par | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. | 
|  | \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | 
|  | \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | 
|  | \def\secondary#1#2{{% | 
|  | \parfillskip=0in | 
|  | \parskip=0in | 
|  | \hangindent=1in | 
|  | \hangafter=1 | 
|  | \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | 
|  | \else | 
|  | #2 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \par | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | 
|  | % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | 
|  | % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | 
|  | \catcode`\@=11 | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newbox\partialpage | 
|  | \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | 
|  | % Grab any single-column material above us. | 
|  | \output = {% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | 
|  | % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | 
|  | % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | 
|  | % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In | 
|  | % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | 
|  | % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | 
|  | % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case. | 
|  | \ifvoid\partialpage \else | 
|  | \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | 
|  | % Unvbox the main output page. | 
|  | \unvbox\PAGE | 
|  | \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | 
|  | \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this | 
|  | % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | 
|  | % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple | 
|  | % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | 
|  | % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | 
|  | % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | 
|  | % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant | 
|  | % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | 
|  | % as it did when we hard-coded it. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | 
|  | % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | 
|  | % been clobbered. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | 
|  | \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | 
|  | \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | 
|  | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here, | 
|  | % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | 
|  | \vsize = 2\vsize | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | 
|  | % the last. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doublecolumnout{% | 
|  | \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | 
|  | % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | 
|  | % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | 
|  | % previous page. | 
|  | \dimen@ = \vsize | 
|  | \divide\dimen@ by 2 | 
|  | \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | 
|  | % | 
|  | % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | 
|  | \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | 
|  | \onepageout\pagesofar | 
|  | \unvbox255 | 
|  | \penalty\outputpenalty | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | 
|  | % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | 
|  | \def\pagesofar{% | 
|  | \unvbox\partialpage | 
|  | % | 
|  | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | 
|  | \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | 
|  | \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % All done with double columns. | 
|  | \def\enddoublecolumns{% | 
|  | \output = {% | 
|  | % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the | 
|  | % current page, no automatic page break. | 
|  | \balancecolumns | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | 
|  | % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | 
|  | % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | 
|  | % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal | 
|  | % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | 
|  | % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | 
|  | % the output somewhat more palatable.) | 
|  | \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \eject | 
|  | \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | 
|  | % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column | 
|  | % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | 
|  | % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | 
|  | \pagegoal = \vsize | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Called at the end of the double column material. | 
|  | \def\balancecolumns{% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | 
|  | \dimen@ = \ht0 | 
|  | \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | 
|  | \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | 
|  | \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | 
|  | %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | 
|  | \splittopskip = \topskip | 
|  | % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \vbadness = 10000 | 
|  | \loop | 
|  | \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | 
|  | \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | 
|  | \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | 
|  | \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | 
|  | \repeat | 
|  | }% | 
|  | %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | 
|  | \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | 
|  | \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \pagesofar | 
|  | } | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = \other | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{sectioning,} | 
|  | % Chapters, sections, etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered | 
|  | % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | 
|  | % outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter | 
|  | % numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000 | 
|  | % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | 
|  | \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | 
|  | \newcount\chapno | 
|  | \newcount\secno        \secno=0 | 
|  | \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0 | 
|  | \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | 
|  | \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@ | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} | 
|  | % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple | 
|  | % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | 
|  | % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\appendixletter{% | 
|  | \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | 
|  | % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | 
|  | % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not | 
|  | % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | 
|  | % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | 
|  | \else\char\the\appendixno | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. | 
|  | % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise. | 
|  | % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. | 
|  | \def\thischapter{} | 
|  | \def\thissection{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | 
|  | \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | 
|  | \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | 
|  | \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | 
|  | \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | 
|  | \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Choose a numbered-heading macro | 
|  | % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections | 
|  | % #2 is text for heading | 
|  | \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
|  | \ifcase\absseclevel | 
|  | \chapterzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \seczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \numberedsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \chapterzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \else \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels | 
|  | \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
|  | \ifcase\absseclevel | 
|  | \appendixzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \appendixsectionzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \appendixsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \appendixzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \else \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels | 
|  | \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
|  | \ifcase\absseclevel | 
|  | \unnumberedzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \unnumberedseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \unnumberedzzz{#2}% | 
|  | \else \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset | 
|  | % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers | 
|  | % (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | 
|  | \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | 
|  | % | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | 
|  | \def\chapterzzz#1{% | 
|  | % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | 
|  | % as an @include file. | 
|  | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \global\advance\chapno by 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Used for \float. | 
|  | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | 
|  | \resetallfloatnos | 
|  | % | 
|  | \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Write the actual heading. | 
|  | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | 
|  | \global\let\section = \numberedsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | 
|  | \def\appendixzzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | 
|  | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | 
|  | \resetallfloatnos | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | 
|  | \message{\appendixnum}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \global\let\section = \appendixsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{{\unnumberedyyy{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | 
|  | \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | 
|  | \resetallfloatnos | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | 
|  | % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | 
|  | % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | 
|  | % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | 
|  | % to be executed, not expanded). | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | 
|  | % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use | 
|  | % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | 
|  | % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for | 
|  | % the toc entries.) | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \message{(\the\toks0)}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @top is like @unnumbered. | 
|  | \let\top\unnumbered | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sections. | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz | 
|  | \def\seczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | 
|  | \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsections. | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | 
|  | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | 
|  | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsubsections. | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | 
|  | {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | 
|  | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | 
|  | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | 
|  | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | 
|  | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. | 
|  | % Actually, they are now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. | 
|  | \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} | 
|  | \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} | 
|  | \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} | 
|  | \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} | 
|  | \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros control what the section commands do, according | 
|  | % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | 
|  | % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | 
|  | \let\section = \numberedsec | 
|  | \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | 
|  | \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | 
|  |  | 
|  | % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | 
|  | %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | 
|  | %          overlong headings to fold. | 
|  | %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | 
|  | %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | 
|  | %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | 
|  | %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright. | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\majorheading{% | 
|  | {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | 
|  | \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | 
|  | \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | 
|  | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | 
|  | \rm #1\hfill}}% | 
|  | \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | 
|  | \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
|  | \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
|  | \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | 
|  | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | 
|  | % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | 
|  | % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | 
|  | \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it | 
|  | % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\chapheadingskip | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | 
|  | \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | 
|  | \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | 
|  | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPPAGon{% | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | 
|  | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | 
|  | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPPAGodd{% | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | 
|  | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | 
|  | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | 
|  | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \CHAPPAGon | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPFplain{% | 
|  | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain | 
|  | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Normal chapter opening. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, | 
|  | % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % To test against our argument. | 
|  | \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | 
|  | \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | 
|  | \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\chfplain#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \pchapsepmacro | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \chapfonts \rm | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the | 
|  | % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called | 
|  | % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | 
|  | % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | 
|  | \def\temptype{#2}% | 
|  | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{unnchap}% | 
|  | \def\thischapter{#1}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | 
|  | \def\toctype{omit}% | 
|  | \xdef\thischapter{}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{app}% | 
|  | % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter | 
|  | % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't | 
|  | % use \thissection because that changes with each section. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: | 
|  | \noexpand\thischaptername}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{numchap}% | 
|  | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: | 
|  | \noexpand\thischaptername}% | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the | 
|  | % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | 
|  | % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | 
|  | \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | 
|  | % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | 
|  | % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | 
|  | % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | 
|  | % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | 
|  | \donoderef{#2}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Typeset the actual heading. | 
|  | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright | 
|  | \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe | 
|  | \unhbox0 #1\par}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | 
|  | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | 
|  | \def\centerchfplain#1{{% | 
|  | \def\centerparametersmaybe{% | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | 
|  | \leftskip = \rightskip | 
|  | \parfillskip = 0pt | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \chfplain{#1}{Ynothing}{}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \CHAPFplain % The default | 
|  |  | 
|  | % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not | 
|  | % updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\unnchfopen #1{% | 
|  | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | 
|  | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | 
|  | \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | 
|  | \par\penalty 5000 % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\centerchfopen #1{% | 
|  | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt | 
|  | \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPFopen{% | 
|  | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | 
|  | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and | 
|  | % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\secheadingskip | 
|  | \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsection titles. | 
|  | \newskip\subsecheadingskip | 
|  | \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsubsection titles. | 
|  | \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} | 
|  | \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Print any size, any type, section title. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is | 
|  | % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | 
|  | % section number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Switch to the right set of fonts. | 
|  | \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Insert space above the heading. | 
|  | \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. | 
|  | \def\sectionlevel{#2}% | 
|  | \def\temptype{#3}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{unn}% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | 
|  | % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | 
|  | % and don't redefine \thissection. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{omit}% | 
|  | \let\sectionlevel=\empty | 
|  | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{app}% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | 
|  | \def\toctype{num}% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chfplain. | 
|  | \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). | 
|  | % Again, see comments in \chfplain. | 
|  | \donoderef{#3}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Output the actual section heading. | 
|  | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright | 
|  | \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number | 
|  | \unhbox0 #1}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. | 
|  | % Don't allow stretch, though. | 
|  | \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | 
|  | % was followed by glue. | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | 
|  | % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | 
|  | % discardable item.) | 
|  | \vskip-\parskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This \nobreak is purely so the last item on the list is a \penalty | 
|  | % of 10000.  This is so other code, for instance \parsebodycommon, can | 
|  | % check for and avoid allowing breakpoints.  Otherwise, it would | 
|  | % insert a valid breakpoint between: | 
|  | %   @section sec-whatever | 
|  | %   @deffn def-whatever | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{toc,} | 
|  | % Table of contents. | 
|  | \newwrite\tocfile | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | 
|  | % Called from @chapter, etc. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} | 
|  | % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | 
|  | % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | 
|  | % read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | 
|  | % destination to jump to. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or | 
|  | % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | 
|  | % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the | 
|  | % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\iftocfileopened | 
|  | \def\omitkeyword{omit}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | 
|  | \iftocfileopened\else | 
|  | \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | 
|  | \global\tocfileopenedtrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \toks0 = {#2}% | 
|  | \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}% | 
|  | {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | 
|  | % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't | 
|  | % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | 
|  | % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | 
|  | % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named | 
|  | % `1', and two named `2'. | 
|  | \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | 
|  | \newcount\savepageno | 
|  | \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\startcontents#1{% | 
|  | % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should | 
|  | % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain | 
|  | % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | 
|  | % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | 
|  | \contentsalignmacro | 
|  | \immediate\closeout\tocfile | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | 
|  | % It is abundantly clear what they are. | 
|  | \def\thischapter{}% | 
|  | \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \savepageno = \pageno | 
|  | \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly. | 
|  | \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11 | 
|  | % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section | 
|  | % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97. | 
|  | %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi | 
|  | \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Roman numerals for page numbers. | 
|  | \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Normal (long) toc. | 
|  | \def\contents{% | 
|  | \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \vfill \eject | 
|  | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \pdfmakeoutlines | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | 
|  | \global\pageno = \savepageno | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % And just the chapters. | 
|  | \def\summarycontents{% | 
|  | \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | 
|  | \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | 
|  | \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | 
|  | % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | 
|  | \secfonts | 
|  | \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | 
|  | \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | 
|  | \rm | 
|  | \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | 
|  | \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | 
|  | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | 
|  | \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \vfill \eject | 
|  | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | 
|  | \global\pageno = \savepageno | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. | 
|  | % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | 
|  | % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | 
|  | % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | 
|  | % But use \hss just in case. | 
|  | % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | 
|  | % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange | 
|  | % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and | 
|  | % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | 
|  | % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | 
|  | % there are before deciding ... | 
|  | \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | 
|  | % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | 
|  | % The last argument is the page number. | 
|  | % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Chapters, in the main contents. | 
|  | \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Chapters, in the short toc. | 
|  | % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | 
|  | \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% | 
|  | \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Appendices, in the main contents. | 
|  | % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\appendixbox#1{% | 
|  | % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | 
|  | \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Unnumbered chapters. | 
|  | \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} | 
|  | \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sections. | 
|  | \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
|  | \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | 
|  | \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsections. | 
|  | \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
|  | \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | 
|  | \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % And subsubsections. | 
|  | \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
|  | \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | 
|  | \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | 
|  | % Same as \defaultparindent. | 
|  | \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | 
|  | % page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | 
|  | % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | 
|  | \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | 
|  | \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \chapentryfonts | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. | 
|  | \let\tocentry = \entry | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | 
|  | \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | 
|  | \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | 
|  | \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | 
|  | \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | 
|  | \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{environments,} | 
|  | % @foo ... @end foo. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of | 
|  | % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\point{$\star$} | 
|  | \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | 
|  | \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | 
|  | \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | 
|  | \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The @error{} command. | 
|  | % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newbox\errorbox | 
|  | % | 
|  | {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. | 
|  | \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | 
|  | % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil | 
|  | \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | 
|  | \vbox{% | 
|  | \hrule height\dimen2 | 
|  | \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text. | 
|  | \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | 
|  | \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | 
|  | \hrule height\dimen2} | 
|  | \hfil} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | 
|  | % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | 
|  | % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \envdef\tex{% | 
|  | \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 | 
|  | \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | 
|  | \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie | 
|  | \catcode `\%=14 | 
|  | \catcode `\+=\other | 
|  | \catcode `\"=\other | 
|  | \catcode `\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode `\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode `\>=\other | 
|  | \escapechar=`\\ | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\b=\ptexb | 
|  | \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | 
|  | \let\c=\ptexc | 
|  | \let\,=\ptexcomma | 
|  | \let\.=\ptexdot | 
|  | \let\dots=\ptexdots | 
|  | \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | 
|  | \let\!=\ptexexclam | 
|  | \let\i=\ptexi | 
|  | \let\indent=\ptexindent | 
|  | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | 
|  | \let\{=\ptexlbrace | 
|  | \let\+=\tabalign | 
|  | \let\}=\ptexrbrace | 
|  | \let\/=\ptexslash | 
|  | \let\*=\ptexstar | 
|  | \let\t=\ptext | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | 
|  | \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | 
|  | \def\@{@}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | % There is no need to define \Etex. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. | 
|  | % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, | 
|  | % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | 
|  | \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | 
|  | % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | 
|  | % have any width. | 
|  | \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This space is always present above and below environments. | 
|  | \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here | 
|  | % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | 
|  | % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | 
|  | % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\aboveenvbreak{{% | 
|  | % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v. | 
|  | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else | 
|  | \advance\envskipamount by \parskip | 
|  | \endgraf | 
|  | \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | 
|  | \removelastskip | 
|  | % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak | 
|  | % or better ... | 
|  | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | 
|  | \vskip\envskipamount | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | 
|  | % environment contents. | 
|  | \font\circle=lcircle10 | 
|  | \newdimen\circthick | 
|  | \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | 
|  | \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | 
|  | \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | 
|  | \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | 
|  | \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | 
|  | \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | 
|  | \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | 
|  | \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | 
|  | \hskip\rskip}} | 
|  | \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | 
|  | \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | 
|  | \hskip\rskip}} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | 
|  |  | 
|  | \envdef\cartouche{% | 
|  | \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | 
|  | \startsavinginserts | 
|  | \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | 
|  | \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | 
|  | \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | 
|  | \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | 
|  | \cartouter=\hsize | 
|  | \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either | 
|  | % side, and for 6pt waste from | 
|  | % each corner char, and rule thickness | 
|  | \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | 
|  | % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing=\comment | 
|  | \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | 
|  | \carttop | 
|  | \hbox\bgroup | 
|  | \hskip\lskip | 
|  | \vrule\kern3pt | 
|  | \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \kern3pt | 
|  | \hsize=\cartinner | 
|  | \baselineskip=\normbskip | 
|  | \lineskip=\normlskip | 
|  | \parskip=\normpskip | 
|  | \vskip -\parskip | 
|  | \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\Ecartouche{% | 
|  | \ifhmode\par\fi | 
|  | \kern3pt | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \kern3pt\vrule | 
|  | \hskip\rskip | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \cartbot | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \checkinserts | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | 
|  | % inside a group. | 
|  | \def\nonfillstart{% | 
|  | \aboveenvbreak | 
|  | \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | 
|  | \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | 
|  | \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | 
|  | \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | 
|  | \parskip = 0pt | 
|  | \parindent = 0pt | 
|  | \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | 
|  | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing | 
|  | % at next level down. | 
|  | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | 
|  | \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. | 
|  | % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | 
|  | % This affects the following displayed environments: | 
|  | %    @example, @display, @format, @lisp | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\smallword{small} | 
|  | \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | 
|  | \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | 
|  | \def\setnormaldispenv{% | 
|  | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | 
|  | \smallexamplefonts \rm | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\setsmalldispenv{% | 
|  | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \smallexamplefonts \rm | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. | 
|  | % Let's do it by one command: | 
|  | \def\makedispenv #1#2{ | 
|  | \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} | 
|  | \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define two synonyms: | 
|  | \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ | 
|  | \makedispenv{#1}{#3} | 
|  | \makedispenv{#2}{#3} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. | 
|  | % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \tt | 
|  | \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. | 
|  | \gobble       % eat return | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \makedispenv {display}{% | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \makedispenv{format}{% | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = t% | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. | 
|  | \envdef\flushleft{% | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = t% | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @flushright. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envdef\flushright{% | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = t% | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | 
|  | % and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since | 
|  | % we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | 
|  | % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envdef\quotation{% | 
|  | {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip | 
|  | \parindent=0pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | 
|  | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = \relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \parsearg\quotationlabel | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're | 
|  | % doing normal filling. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\Equotation{% | 
|  | \par | 
|  | \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else | 
|  | % indent a bit. | 
|  | \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. | 
|  | \def\quotationlabel#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty \else | 
|  | {\bf #1: }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | 
|  | % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, | 
|  | % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: | 
|  | % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets | 
|  | % active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | 
|  | % verbatim line. | 
|  | \def\dospecials{% | 
|  | \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% | 
|  | \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | 
|  | \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] p. 380 | 
|  | \def\uncatcodespecials{% | 
|  | \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 | 
|  | % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Setup for the @verb command. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Eight spaces for a tab | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^I=\active | 
|  | \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setupverb{% | 
|  | \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | 
|  | \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | 
|  | \catcode`\`=\active | 
|  | \tabeightspaces | 
|  | % Respect line breaks, | 
|  | % print special symbols as themselves, and | 
|  | % make each space count | 
|  | % must do in this order: | 
|  | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Setup for the @verbatim environment | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Real tab expansion | 
|  | \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^I=\active | 
|  | \gdef\tabexpand{% | 
|  | \catcode`\^^I=\active | 
|  | \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | 
|  | \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | 
|  | \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | 
|  | \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | 
|  | \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw | 
|  | \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \def\setupverbatim{% | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | 
|  | % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | 
|  | \tt | 
|  | \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | 
|  | \catcode`\`=\active | 
|  | \tabexpand | 
|  | % Respect line breaks, | 
|  | % print special symbols as themselves, and | 
|  | % make each space count | 
|  | % must do in this order: | 
|  | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | 
|  | \everypar{\starttabbox}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique | 
|  | % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a | 
|  | % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: | 
|  | % | 
|  | %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other | 
|  | \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | 
|  | % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | 
|  | % | 
|  | %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, | 
|  | % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': | 
|  | % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | 
|  | % | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\ =\active | 
|  | \obeylines % | 
|  | % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | 
|  | % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank | 
|  | % line in the output. | 
|  | \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | 
|  | % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | 
|  | % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envdef\verbatim{% | 
|  | \setupverbatim\doverbatim | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \makevalueexpandable | 
|  | \setupverbatim | 
|  | \input #1 | 
|  | \afterenvbreak | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @copying ... @end copying. | 
|  | % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.  Many commands won't be | 
|  | % allowed in this context, but that's ok. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. | 
|  | % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | 
|  | % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | 
|  | % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | 
|  | % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | 
|  | % possible is very desirable. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\copying{\begingroup | 
|  | % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'. | 
|  | % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the | 
|  | % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read | 
|  | % it, but that doesn't matter. | 
|  | \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below. | 
|  | \catcode`\^^M = \active | 
|  | \docopying | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % What we do to finish off the copying text. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand, | 
|  | % we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they | 
|  | % must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every | 
|  | % end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active | 
|  | % definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still | 
|  | % generate a \par. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally; | 
|  | % then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually | 
|  | % do \par. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine | 
|  | % it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc | 
|  | % manual for man page generation.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably | 
|  | % fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which | 
|  | % should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok. | 
|  | % | 
|  | {\catcode`\^^M=\active % | 
|  | \gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup % | 
|  | \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page | 
|  | \def^^M{% | 
|  | \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 % | 
|  | \par % | 
|  | \else % | 
|  | \space \penalty 1 % | 
|  | \fi % | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's. | 
|  | \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}% | 
|  | \let\comment = \c % | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it | 
|  | % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set. | 
|  | \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \copyingtext % | 
|  | \endgroup}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{defuns,} | 
|  | % @defun etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | 
|  | \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | 
|  | \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Start the processing of @deffn: | 
|  | \def\startdefun{% | 
|  | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | 
|  | \medbreak | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | 
|  | % which is there to keep the function description together with its | 
|  | % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | 
|  | % break somewhere.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by | 
|  | % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning | 
|  | % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break | 
|  | % between a section heading and a defun. | 
|  | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | 
|  | % But do insert the glue. | 
|  | \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dodefunx#1{% | 
|  | % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | 
|  | \checkenv#1% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | 
|  | % It's not a great place, though. | 
|  | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | 
|  | \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | % call \deffnheader: | 
|  | #1#2 \endheader | 
|  | % common ending: | 
|  | \interlinepenalty = 10000 | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | 
|  | \endgraf | 
|  | \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | 
|  | \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx | 
|  | % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, | 
|  | % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize. | 
|  | \checkparencounts | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; | 
|  | % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\makedefun#1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | 
|  | \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. | 
|  | % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \envdef#1{% | 
|  | \startdefun | 
|  | \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | 
|  | \def#3% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Untyped functions: | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deffn category name args | 
|  | \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deffn category class name args | 
|  | \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \defopon {category on}class name args | 
|  | \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | 
|  | % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | 
|  | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | 
|  | \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Typed functions: | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypefn category type name args | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypeop category class type name args | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args | 
|  | \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | 
|  | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | 
|  | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Typed variables: | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypevr category type var args | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypecv category class type var args | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args | 
|  | \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | 
|  | \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | 
|  | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Untyped variables: | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defvr category var args | 
|  | \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defcv category class var args | 
|  | \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \defcvof {category of}class var args | 
|  | \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Type: | 
|  | % @deftp category name args | 
|  | \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | 
|  | \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | 
|  | \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: | 
|  | \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | 
|  | \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | 
|  | \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | 
|  | \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | 
|  | \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | 
|  | \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | 
|  | \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | 
|  | \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). | 
|  | % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | 
|  | % #2 is the return type, if any. | 
|  | % #3 is the function name. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defname#1#2#3{% | 
|  | % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | 
|  | % | 
|  | % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps | 
|  | % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | 
|  | % just below it. | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. | 
|  | % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | 
|  | % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | 
|  | \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | 
|  | % The continuations: | 
|  | \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | 
|  | % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) | 
|  | \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Put the type name to the right margin. | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | \hbox to 0pt{% | 
|  | \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | 
|  | % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | 
|  | \kern\leftskip | 
|  | % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | 
|  | \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | 
|  | % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | 
|  | % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | 
|  | %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in | 
|  | %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | 
|  | % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | 
|  | % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | 
|  | %   one has made identifiers using them :). | 
|  | \df \tt | 
|  | \def\temp{#2}% return value type | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi | 
|  | #3% output function name | 
|  | }% | 
|  | {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | 
|  | % | 
|  | \boldbrax | 
|  | % arguments will be output next, if any. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using | 
|  | % tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | 
|  | % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | 
|  | % distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defunargs#1{% | 
|  | % use sl by default (not ttsl), | 
|  | % tt for the names. | 
|  | \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | 
|  | % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that. | 
|  | \let\var=\ttslanted | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\activeparens{% | 
|  | \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | 
|  | \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | 
|  | \catcode`\&=\active | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | 
|  | \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example, | 
|  | % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | 
|  | % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \activeparens | 
|  | \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | 
|  | \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | 
|  | \global\let& = \& | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | 
|  | \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\parencount | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | 
|  | \newif\ifampseen | 
|  | \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\parenfont{% | 
|  | \ifampseen | 
|  | % At the first level, print parens in roman, | 
|  | % otherwise use the default font. | 
|  | \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | 
|  | % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] . | 
|  | \sf | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\infirstlevel#1{% | 
|  | \ifampseen | 
|  | \ifnum\parencount=1 | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\opnr{% | 
|  | \global\advance\parencount by 1 | 
|  | {\parenfont(}% | 
|  | \infirstlevel \bfafterword | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\clnr{% | 
|  | {\parenfont)}% | 
|  | \infirstlevel \sl | 
|  | \global\advance\parencount by -1 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\brackcount | 
|  | \def\lbrb{% | 
|  | \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | 
|  | {\bf[}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\rbrb{% | 
|  | {\bf]}% | 
|  | \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\checkparencounts{% | 
|  | \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | 
|  | \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\badparencount{% | 
|  | \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% | 
|  | \global\parencount=0 | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\badbrackcount{% | 
|  | \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% | 
|  | \global\brackcount=0 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{macros,} | 
|  | % @macro. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | 
|  | % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | 
|  | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | 
|  | \newwrite\macscribble | 
|  | \def\scantokens#1{% | 
|  | \toks0={#1\endinput}% | 
|  | \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | 
|  | \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | \immediate\closeout\macscribble | 
|  | \input \jobname.tmp | 
|  | } | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\scanmacro#1{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \newlinechar`\^^M | 
|  | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | 
|  | % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | 
|  | \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@ | 
|  | % ... and \example | 
|  | \spaceisspace | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX | 
|  | %							--kasal, 29nov03 | 
|  | \scantokens{#1\endinput}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters | 
|  | \newtoks\macname    % Macro name | 
|  | \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive? | 
|  | \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form | 
|  | % \do\macro1\do\macro2... | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Utility routines. | 
|  | % This does \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames. | 
|  | \def\cslet#1#2{% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \expandafter\let | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \csname#1\endcsname | 
|  | \csname#2\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | 
|  | % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | 
|  | {\catcode`\@=11 | 
|  | \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | 
|  | \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | 
|  | \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | 
|  | \def\unbrace#1{#1} | 
|  | \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | 
|  | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% | 
|  | \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% | 
|  | \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | 
|  | \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | 
|  | % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | 
|  | % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | 
|  | % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | 
|  | % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macrobodyctxt{% | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\+=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\{=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\}=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\@=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^M=\other | 
|  | \usembodybackslash} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macroargctxt{% | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\+=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\@=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\\=\other} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | 
|  | % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | 
|  | % where N is the macro parameter number. | 
|  | % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | 
|  | % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | 
|  | @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | 
|  | @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | 
|  | } | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | 
|  | \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macroxxx#1{% | 
|  | \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | 
|  | \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments | 
|  | \paramno=0% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | 
|  | \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | 
|  | \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi | 
|  | \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | 
|  | % Add the macroname to \macrolist | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% | 
|  | \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | 
|  | \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | 
|  | \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \parseargdef\unmacro{% | 
|  | \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname | 
|  | \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | 
|  | \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | 
|  | % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax | 
|  | \let\do\unmacrodo | 
|  | \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any | 
|  | % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\unmacrodo#1{% | 
|  | \ifx#1\relax | 
|  | % remove this | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \noexpand\do \noexpand #1% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a | 
|  | % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | 
|  | % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | 
|  | \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | 
|  | \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | 
|  | \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | 
|  | \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist | 
|  | % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah | 
|  | % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | 
|  | % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | 
|  | % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something | 
|  | % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | 
|  | % it to # just before using the token list produced. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | 
|  | % the macro is used. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | 
|  | \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | 
|  | \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | 
|  | \if#1;\let\next=\relax | 
|  | \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | 
|  | \advance\paramno by 1% | 
|  | \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | 
|  | {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | 
|  | \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | 
|  | \fi\next} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | 
|  | % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | 
|  |  | 
|  | \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | 
|  | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | 
|  | \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | 
|  | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | 
|  | % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | 
|  | % Much magic with \expandafter here. | 
|  | % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | 
|  | % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | 
|  | \def\defmacro{% | 
|  | \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | 
|  | \ifrecursive | 
|  | \ifcase\paramno | 
|  | % 0 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
|  | \or % 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \noexpand\braceorline | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
|  | \else % many | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | 
|  | \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifcase\paramno | 
|  | % 0 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
|  | \or % 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \noexpand\braceorline | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
|  | \else % many | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | 
|  | \paramlist{% | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | 
|  | % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | 
|  | % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | 
|  | % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | 
|  | \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} | 
|  | \def\braceorlinexxx{% | 
|  | \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | 
|  | \expandafter\parsearg | 
|  | \fi \next} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not | 
|  | % expanded by \write. | 
|  | \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% | 
|  | \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @alias. | 
|  | % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | 
|  | % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | 
|  | \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} | 
|  | \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} | 
|  | \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | 
|  | \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \next | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{cross references,} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newwrite\auxfile | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known. | 
|  | \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @inforef is relatively simple. | 
|  | \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | 
|  | \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | 
|  | node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in | 
|  | % cross-references. | 
|  | \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\nodexxx #1,\finishnodeparse} | 
|  | \def\nodexxx#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | 
|  | \let\nwnode=\node | 
|  | \let\lastnode=\empty | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the | 
|  | % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\donoderef#1{% | 
|  | \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | 
|  | \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | 
|  | \global\let\lastnode=\empty | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newcount\savesfregister | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | 
|  | \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | 
|  | \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | 
|  | % anchor), which consists of three parts: | 
|  | % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, | 
|  | %                 or the anchor name. | 
|  | % 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | 
|  | %                 empty for anchors. | 
|  | % 3) NAME-pg    - the page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of | 
|  | % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | 
|  | % 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setref#1#2{% | 
|  | \pdfmkdest{#1}% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them | 
|  | \turnoffactive | 
|  | \otherbackslash | 
|  | \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | 
|  | \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | 
|  | ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% | 
|  | \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% | 
|  | \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | 
|  | \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is | 
|  | % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | 
|  | % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | 
|  | % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
|  | \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
|  | \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
|  | \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | 
|  | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% | 
|  | \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | 
|  | \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt | 
|  | % No printed node name was explicitly given. | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | 
|  | % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | 
|  | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | 
|  | % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it. | 
|  | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | 
|  | % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | 
|  | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifhavexrefs | 
|  | % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | 
|  | \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | 
|  | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make link in pdf output. | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | \getfilename{#4}% | 
|  | {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash | 
|  | \ifnum\filenamelength>0 | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
|  | goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
|  | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \linkcolor | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" | 
|  | % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the | 
|  | % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | 
|  | % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | 
|  | \indexnofonts | 
|  | \turnoffactive | 
|  | \otherbackslash | 
|  | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | 
|  | \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | 
|  | % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | 
|  | % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | 
|  | \refx{#1-snt}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \printedrefname | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | 
|  | % "in MANUALNAME". | 
|  | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | 
|  | \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % node/anchor (non-float) references. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | 
|  | % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | 
|  | % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals | 
|  | % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | 
|  | % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | 
|  | % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | 
|  | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | 
|  | \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | 
|  | % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | 
|  | % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | 
|  | % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | 
|  | % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | 
|  | {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash | 
|  | % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | 
|  | % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | 
|  | \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | 
|  | \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | 
|  | \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But we always want a comma and a space: | 
|  | ,\space | 
|  | % | 
|  | % output the `page 3'. | 
|  | \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref | 
|  | % output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | 
|  | % since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly | 
|  | % one that Bob is working on :). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Things referred to by \setref. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\Ynothing{} | 
|  | \def\Yomitfromtoc{} | 
|  | \def\Ynumbered{% | 
|  | \ifnum\secno=0 | 
|  | \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | 
|  | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | 
|  | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | 
|  | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\Yappendix{% | 
|  | \ifnum\secno=0 | 
|  | \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | 
|  | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | 
|  | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | 
|  | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \putwordSection@tie | 
|  | @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | 
|  | % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\refx#1#2{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \indexnofonts | 
|  | \otherbackslash | 
|  | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | 
|  | \csname XR#1\endcsname | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \ifx\thisrefX\relax | 
|  | % If not defined, say something at least. | 
|  | \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \ifhavexrefs | 
|  | \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifwarnedxrefs\else | 
|  | \global\warnedxrefstrue | 
|  | \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % It's defined, so just use it. | 
|  | \thisrefX | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | #2% Output the suffix in any case. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's | 
|  | % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | 
|  | % collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\xrdef#1#2{% | 
|  | \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | 
|  | \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname | 
|  | % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. | 
|  | \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | 
|  | \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | 
|  | \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | 
|  | % for later use in \listoffloats. | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\tryauxfile{% | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.aux | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \readauxfile | 
|  | \global\havexrefstrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\readauxfile{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^@=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^A=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^B=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^C=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^D=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^E=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^F=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^G=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^H=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^K=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^L=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^N=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^P=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^Q=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^R=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^S=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^T=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^U=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^V=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^W=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^X=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^Z=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^[=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^\=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^]=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^_=\other | 
|  | % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. | 
|  | % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't | 
|  | % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore, | 
|  | % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | 
|  | % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | 
|  | % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | 
|  | % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could | 
|  | % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | 
|  | % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | 
|  | % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\other | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but... | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\[=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\]=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\"=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\$=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\#=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\&=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\%=\other | 
|  | \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | 
|  | % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than | 
|  | % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | 
|  | % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | 
|  | % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | 
|  | % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for | 
|  | % now.  --karl, 15jan04. | 
|  | \catcode`\\=\other | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \count 1=128 | 
|  | \def\loop{% | 
|  | \catcode\count 1=\other | 
|  | \advance\count 1 by 1 | 
|  | \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | 
|  | \catcode`\{=1 | 
|  | \catcode`\}=2 | 
|  | \catcode`\@=0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \input \jobname.aux | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{insertions,} | 
|  | % including footnotes. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount \footnoteno | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | 
|  | % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | 
|  | % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | 
|  | % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | 
|  | % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | 
|  | \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | 
|  | \let\footnotestyle=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\catcode `\@=11 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain. | 
|  | \gdef\footnote{% | 
|  | \let\indent=\ptexindent | 
|  | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | 
|  | \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne | 
|  | \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | 
|  | % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | 
|  | \let\@sf\empty | 
|  | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | 
|  | \unskip | 
|  | \thisfootno\@sf | 
|  | \dofootnote | 
|  | }% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | 
|  | % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses | 
|  | % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | 
|  | % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\dofootnote{% | 
|  | \insert\footins\bgroup | 
|  | % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the | 
|  | % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | 
|  | % So reset some parameters. | 
|  | \hsize=\pagewidth | 
|  | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty | 
|  | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | 
|  | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | 
|  | \floatingpenalty\@MM | 
|  | \leftskip\z@skip | 
|  | \rightskip\z@skip | 
|  | \spaceskip\z@skip | 
|  | \xspaceskip\z@skip | 
|  | \parindent\defaultparindent | 
|  | % | 
|  | \smallfonts \rm | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears | 
|  | % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use | 
|  | % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | 
|  | % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | 
|  | \let\noindent = \relax | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the | 
|  | % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | 
|  | \everypar = {\hang}% | 
|  | \textindent{\thisfootno}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this | 
|  | % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | 
|  | % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | 
|  | \footstrut | 
|  | \futurelet\next\fo@t | 
|  | } | 
|  | }%end \catcode `\@=11 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create | 
|  | % the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion | 
|  | % would be lost. | 
|  | % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote | 
|  | % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. | 
|  | % And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | 
|  | % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | 
|  | % out prematurely. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\startsavinginserts{% | 
|  | \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | 
|  | \let\insert\saveinsert | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\checkinserts\relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and | 
|  | % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\saveinsert#1{% | 
|  | \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | 
|  | \afterassignment\next | 
|  | % swallow the left brace | 
|  | \let\temp = | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} | 
|  | \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\placesaveins#1{% | 
|  | \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | 
|  | {\box#1}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | 
|  | { | 
|  | \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-) | 
|  | \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % initialization: | 
|  | \def\newsaveins #1{% | 
|  | \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | 
|  | \next | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | 
|  | \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | 
|  | \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | 
|  | \checksaveins #1}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % initialize: | 
|  | \let\checkinserts\empty | 
|  | \newsaveins\footins | 
|  | \newsaveins\margin | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | 
|  | % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image | 
|  | % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | 
|  | % undone and the next image would fail. | 
|  | \openin 1 = epsf.tex | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in | 
|  | % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | 
|  | \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% | 
|  | \input epsf.tex | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | 
|  | \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | 
|  | \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | 
|  | work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | 
|  | it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\image#1{% | 
|  | \ifx\epsfbox\undefined | 
|  | \ifwarnednoepsf \else | 
|  | \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | 
|  | \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | 
|  | \global\warnednoepsftrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Arguments to @image: | 
|  | % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | 
|  | % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | 
|  | % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. | 
|  | % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | 
|  | % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | 
|  | \newif\ifimagevmode | 
|  | \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names | 
|  | % If the image is by itself, center it. | 
|  | \ifvmode | 
|  | \imagevmodetrue | 
|  | \nobreak\bigskip | 
|  | % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | 
|  | % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | 
|  | % above and below. | 
|  | \nobreak\vskip\parskip | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \line\bgroup\hss | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Output the image. | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | 
|  | \epsfbox{#1.eps}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @float FLOATTYPE,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, etc. | 
|  | % We don't actually implement floating yet, we just plop the float "here". | 
|  | % But it seemed the best name for the future. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \envparseargdef\float{\dofloat #1,,,\finish} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | 
|  | % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted, | 
|  | % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to | 
|  | % be referable. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It | 
|  | % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each | 
|  | % chapter-level command. | 
|  | \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | 
|  | \let\thiscaption=\empty | 
|  | \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | 
|  | % | 
|  | % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | 
|  | \startsavinginserts | 
|  | % | 
|  | \vtop\bgroup | 
|  | \def\floattype{#1}% | 
|  | \def\floatlabel{#2}% | 
|  | \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\floattype\empty | 
|  | \let\safefloattype=\empty | 
|  | \else | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | 
|  | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | 
|  | \indexnofonts | 
|  | \turnoffactive | 
|  | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | 
|  | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | 
|  | % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | 
|  | % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname | 
|  | \global\advance\floatno by 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the | 
|  | % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float | 
|  | % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | 
|  | % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the | 
|  | % lists of floats. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% | 
|  | \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | 
|  | \vskip\parskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | 
|  | \restorefirstparagraphindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % we have these possibilities: | 
|  | % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | 
|  | % @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1 | 
|  | % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap | 
|  | % @float Foo & no caption:        Foo | 
|  | % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap | 
|  | % @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1 | 
|  | % @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap | 
|  | % @float & no caption: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\Efloat{% | 
|  | \let\floatident = \empty | 
|  | % | 
|  | % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | 
|  | \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | 
|  | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | 
|  | \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | 
|  | \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % the number. | 
|  | \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | 
|  | % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | 
|  | \let\captionline = \floatident | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | 
|  | \ifx\floatident\empty \else | 
|  | \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % caption text. | 
|  | \appendtomacro\captionline\thiscaption | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | 
|  | % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | 
|  | \ifx\captionline\empty \else | 
|  | \vskip.5\parskip | 
|  | \captionline | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this | 
|  | % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | 
|  | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | 
|  | % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | 
|  | % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short | 
|  | % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash | 
|  | \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{% | 
|  | \floatident | 
|  | \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | 
|  | \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else : \thiscaption \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | : \thisshortcaption | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Space below caption, if we printed anything. | 
|  | \ifx\printedsomething\empty \else \vskip\parskip \fi | 
|  | \egroup  % end of \vtop | 
|  | \checkinserts | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newtoks\appendtomacroAtoks | 
|  | \newtoks\appendtomacroBtoks | 
|  | \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% | 
|  | \appendtomacroAtoks = \expandafter{#1}% | 
|  | \appendtomacroBtoks = {#2}% | 
|  | \edef#1{\the\appendtomacroAtoks \the\appendtomacroBtoks}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @caption, @shortcaption are easy. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \long\def\caption#1{\checkenv\float \def\thiscaption{#1}} | 
|  | \def\shortcaption#1{\checkenv\float \def\thisshortcaption{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | 
|  | % going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | 
|  | \def\getfloatno#1{% | 
|  | \ifx#1\relax | 
|  | % Haven't seen this figure type before. | 
|  | \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | 
|  | \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | 
|  | \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \let\floatno#1% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref | 
|  | % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we | 
|  | % first read the @float command. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | 
|  | % distinguish floats from other xref types. | 
|  | \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | 
|  | % which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic | 
|  | % \thissection value which we \setref above. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the | 
|  | % (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \def\iffloattype{#2}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\floatmagic | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\listoffloats{% | 
|  | \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | 
|  | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | 
|  | \indexnofonts | 
|  | \turnoffactive | 
|  | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | 
|  | \ifhavexrefs | 
|  | % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | 
|  | \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc | 
|  | \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | 
|  | \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the | 
|  | % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | 
|  | % aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | 
|  | % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since | 
|  | % they won't appear in the aux file). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} | 
|  | \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | 
|  | % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just | 
|  | % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | 
|  | % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | 
|  | % in pdf output. | 
|  | \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | 
|  | \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | 
|  | \writeentry | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{localization,} | 
|  | % and i18n. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after | 
|  | % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything | 
|  | % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation. | 
|  | % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\documentlanguage{% | 
|  | \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. | 
|  | % Read the file if it exists. | 
|  | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | 
|  | \ifeof 1 | 
|  | \errhelp = \nolanghelp | 
|  | \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \input txi-#1.tex | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  | \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | 
|  | is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory | 
|  | should work if nowhere else does.} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most | 
|  | % likely, but for now just recognize it. | 
|  | \let\documentencoding = \comment | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Page size parameters. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | 
|  | \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | 
|  | \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | 
|  | \vbadness = 10000 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | 
|  | \hbadness = 2000 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. | 
|  | \widowpenalty=10000 | 
|  | \clubpenalty=10000 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | 
|  | % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of | 
|  | % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | 
|  | % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setemergencystretch{% | 
|  | \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | 
|  | % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | 
|  | \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; | 
|  | % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8) | 
|  | % physical page width. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | 
|  | % \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | 
|  | \voffset = #3\relax | 
|  | \topskip = #6\relax | 
|  | \splittopskip = \topskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | \vsize = #1\relax | 
|  | \advance\vsize by \topskip | 
|  | \outervsize = \vsize | 
|  | \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | 
|  | \pageheight = \vsize | 
|  | % | 
|  | \hsize = #2\relax | 
|  | \outerhsize = \hsize | 
|  | \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | 
|  | \pagewidth = \hsize | 
|  | % | 
|  | \normaloffset = #4\relax | 
|  | \bindingoffset = #5\relax | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \pdfpageheight #7\relax | 
|  | \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \setleading{\textleading} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parindent = \defaultparindent | 
|  | \setemergencystretch | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @letterpaper (the default). | 
|  | \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | 
|  | \textleading = 13.2pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% | 
|  | {\voffset}{.25in}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | 
|  | {11in}{8.5in}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. | 
|  | \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | 
|  | \textleading = 12pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% | 
|  | {\voffset}{.25in}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | 
|  | {9.25in}{7in}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | 
|  | \tolerance = 700 | 
|  | \hfuzz = 1pt | 
|  | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | 
|  | \defbodyindent = .5cm | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | 
|  | \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | 
|  | \textleading = 13.2pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 | 
|  | % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | 
|  | % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | 
|  | % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then | 
|  | % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in | 
|  | % your texinfo source file like this: | 
|  | % @tex | 
|  | % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | 
|  | % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | 
|  | % @end tex | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} | 
|  | {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | 
|  | {297mm}{210mm}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \tolerance = 700 | 
|  | \hfuzz = 1pt | 
|  | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | 
|  | \defbodyindent = 5mm | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. | 
|  | % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | 
|  | % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | 
|  | \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | 
|  | \textleading = 12.5pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% | 
|  | {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | 
|  | {210mm}{148mm}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | 
|  | \tolerance = 800 | 
|  | \hfuzz = 1.2pt | 
|  | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | 
|  | \defbodyindent = 2mm | 
|  | \tableindent = 12mm | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. | 
|  | \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \afourpaper | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% | 
|  | {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | 
|  | {297mm}{210mm}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. | 
|  | \globaldefs = 0 | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. | 
|  | \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \afourpaper | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% | 
|  | {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | 
|  | {297mm}{210mm}% | 
|  | \globaldefs = 0 | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | 
|  | % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | 
|  | % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | 
|  | \globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | 
|  | \setleading{\textleading}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \dimen0 = #1 | 
|  | \advance\dimen0 by \voffset | 
|  | % | 
|  | \dimen2 = \hsize | 
|  | \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | 
|  | % | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | 
|  | {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | 
|  | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | 
|  | {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set default to letter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \letterpaper | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | 
|  | \catcode`\"=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\+=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\$=\other | 
|  | \def\normaldoublequote{"} | 
|  | \def\normaltilde{~} | 
|  | \def\normalcaret{^} | 
|  | \def\normalunderscore{_} | 
|  | \def\normalverticalbar{|} | 
|  | \def\normalless{<} | 
|  | \def\normalgreater{>} | 
|  | \def\normalplus{+} | 
|  | \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt | 
|  | % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | 
|  | % where something hairier probably needs to be done. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | 
|  | % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | 
|  | % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | 
|  | % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches | 
|  | % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | 
|  | % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | 
|  | % this is not a problem. | 
|  | \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Turn off all special characters except @ | 
|  | % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | 
|  | % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | 
|  | % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\"=\active | 
|  | \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | 
|  | \let"=\activedoublequote | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\active | 
|  | \def~{{\tt\char126}} | 
|  | \chardef\hat=`\^ | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\active | 
|  | \def^{{\tt \hat}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active | 
|  | \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | 
|  | % Subroutine for the previous macro. | 
|  | \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\active | 
|  | \def|{{\tt\char124}} | 
|  | \chardef \less=`\< | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\active | 
|  | \def<{{\tt \less}} | 
|  | \chardef \gtr=`\> | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\active | 
|  | \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | 
|  | \catcode`\+=\active | 
|  | \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | 
|  | \catcode`\$=\active | 
|  | \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | 
|  | % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | 
|  | % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | 
|  | % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | 
|  | \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\@=0 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, | 
|  | % as in \char`\\. | 
|  | \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | 
|  | \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. | 
|  | % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | 
|  | % catcode other. | 
|  | {\catcode`\\=\active | 
|  | @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} | 
|  | @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. | 
|  | {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. | 
|  | \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\\=\active | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters | 
|  | % even after parsing them. | 
|  | @def@turnoffactive{% | 
|  | @let"=@normaldoublequote | 
|  | @let\=@realbackslash | 
|  | @let~=@normaltilde | 
|  | @let^=@normalcaret | 
|  | @let_=@normalunderscore | 
|  | @let|=@normalverticalbar | 
|  | @let<=@normalless | 
|  | @let>=@normalgreater | 
|  | @let+=@normalplus | 
|  | @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | 
|  | @unsepspaces | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | 
|  | % the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in | 
|  | % effect.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | @def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | 
|  | % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | 
|  | @otherifyactive | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | 
|  | % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | 
|  | % a backslash. | 
|  | % | 
|  | @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | 
|  | @global@let\ = @eatinput | 
|  |  | 
|  | % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | 
|  | % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix | 
|  | % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. | 
|  | % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input | 
|  | % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. | 
|  | % | 
|  | @gdef@fixbackslash{% | 
|  | @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | 
|  | @catcode`+=@active | 
|  | @catcode`@_=@active | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | 
|  | @escapechar = `@@ | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. | 
|  | @catcode`@& = @other | 
|  | @catcode`@# = @other | 
|  | @catcode`@% = @other | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | @c Local variables: | 
|  | @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | 
|  | @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | 
|  | @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | 
|  | @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | 
|  | @c time-stamp-end: "}" | 
|  | @c End: | 
|  |  | 
|  | @c vim:sw=2: | 
|  |  | 
|  | @ignore | 
|  | arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 | 
|  | @end ignore |